<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Uttiyo</id>
	<title>TurboGAP - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Uttiyo"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php/Special:Contributions/Uttiyo"/>
	<updated>2026-07-08T00:09:42Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.34.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=631</id>
		<title>Eph Tinfile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=631"/>
		<updated>2024-05-31T18:28:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Note (additional uses) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes the name of the file containing the parameters to construct the mesh in three dimensions for the electronic system. If this file is provided, then the corresponding electronic parameters need not be provided in input file as those will not be considered. This file has to be prepared in a standard format. This is shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 1st line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 2nd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 3rd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line – gsx gsy gsz number_of_fdm_steps&lt;br /&gt;
 5th line – mesh_xlimit_low mesh_xlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 6th line – mesh_ylimit_low mesh_ylimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 7th line – mesh_zlimit_low mesh_zlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 8th line – i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 9th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 10th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 Values are provided for the full mesh.&lt;br /&gt;
 [Note that mesh indices i, j, k must start from 1 not 0.]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Example (mostly used)===&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 # 3 lines of comments&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 1&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note (additional uses)=== &lt;br /&gt;
(1) To simulate with an external source term in S_e, at least one value (corresponding to the particular location in the mesh) under the 'flag' column must be set equal to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) To simulate (non-linear case) using temperature-dependent parameters C_e and K_e, at least one value under 'T_dyn_flag' column must be set equal to 1. Then &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;C_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;K_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; has to be provided through a file named as &amp;quot;Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt&amp;quot;, which has a simple format as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
 # First 3 comment lines&lt;br /&gt;
 # Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt file&lt;br /&gt;
 # First N C_e(T_e) with T_e, no line gap, then M K_e(T_e) with T_e &lt;br /&gt;
 N&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 3.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 4.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 5.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
 M&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 0.0048&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 0.0248&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 0.0348&lt;br /&gt;
 300.0 0.0448&lt;br /&gt;
 400.0 0.0515&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Short file names&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If this file is not provided the FDM mesh is constructed from given input (or default) data. Put the name of file within quotes. In case of restarted runs, the appropriate temperature map of the electronic system should be provided from the last run.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_freq_Tout&amp;diff=629</id>
		<title>Eph freq Tout</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_freq_Tout&amp;diff=629"/>
		<updated>2024-04-12T09:27:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_freq_Tout&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the interval of MD steps at which the energy transfer between electronic and atomic systems and the electronic temperature data are written to output file named as 'eph-EnergySharingData.txt'. There will be eight columns of data, viz. time (fs), frictional energy (eV) on current time, random energy (eV) on current time, cumulative net energy transfer (eV) till the current time, the electronic temperature (K) and the temperature (K), kinetic and potential energies (eV) of atoms in the group given through &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_groupID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This output file gets appended in case of restarted runs and a restarted run is denoted by the appropriate values in options &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_E_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_freq_Tout&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 1, 5, 10, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_fdm_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_friction_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_friction_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Use larger interval if cumulative energy transfer is important and temperature variation over broad times are sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=628</id>
		<title>Eph Tinfile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=628"/>
		<updated>2024-04-12T09:19:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes the name of the file containing the parameters to construct the mesh in three dimensions for the electronic system. If this file is provided, then the corresponding electronic parameters need not be provided in input file as those will not be considered. This file has to be prepared in a standard format. This is shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 1st line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 2nd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 3rd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line – gsx gsy gsz number_of_fdm_steps&lt;br /&gt;
 5th line – mesh_xlimit_low mesh_xlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 6th line – mesh_ylimit_low mesh_ylimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 7th line – mesh_zlimit_low mesh_zlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 8th line – i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 9th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 10th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 Values are provided for the full mesh.&lt;br /&gt;
 [Note that mesh indices i, j, k must start from 1 not 0.]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Example (mostly used)===&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 # 3 lines of comments&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 1&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note (additional uses)=== &lt;br /&gt;
(1) To simulate with an external source term in S_e, at least one value under the 'flag' column must be set equal to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) To simulate (non-linear case) using temperature-dependent parameters C_e and K_e, at least one value under 'T_dyn_flag' column must be set equal to 1. Then &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;C_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;K_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; has to be provided through a file named as &amp;quot;Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt&amp;quot;, which has a simple format as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
 # First 3 comment lines&lt;br /&gt;
 # Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt file&lt;br /&gt;
 # First N C_e(T_e) with T_e, no line gap, then M K_e(T_e) with T_e &lt;br /&gt;
 N&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 3.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 4.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 5.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
 M&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 0.0048&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 0.0248&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 0.0348&lt;br /&gt;
 300.0 0.0448&lt;br /&gt;
 400.0 0.0515&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Short file names&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If this file is not provided the FDM mesh is constructed from given input (or default) data. Put the name of file within quotes. In case of restarted runs, the appropriate temperature map of the electronic system should be provided from the last run.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_md_last_step&amp;diff=627</id>
		<title>Eph md last step</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_md_last_step&amp;diff=627"/>
		<updated>2024-04-10T13:38:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the electronic temperature map output file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 100, 1000, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 0&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_freq_mesh_Tout]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| When restarting a eph model simulation with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_fdm_option&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; set, remember to also put correct mesh values from last run into the present file in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_md_last_step&amp;diff=626</id>
		<title>Eph md last step</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_md_last_step&amp;diff=626"/>
		<updated>2024-04-10T13:36:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the electronic temperature map output file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 100, 1000, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 0&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_freq_mesh_Tout]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| When restarting a eph model simulation with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_fdm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option remember to also put correct mesh values from last run into the present file in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_T_infile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=625</id>
		<title>Electronic stopping</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=625"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:29:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the option for doing a radiation cascade simulation where the electronic stopping will be taken into account and electronic energy loss will be calculated. The force equation is modified by a friction-like term which is given as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbf{F}_I = -\mathbf{\nabla}_IU - S_e\frac{\mathbf{v}_I}{v_I}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The electronic stopping powers &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;S_e&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; are provided through an input data file, see related keyword &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
This is typically invoked while simulating collision cascades of atoms. There are a few input keywords for which typically inputs need to be provided if this calculation is invoked. These are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_freq_out&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_E_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Boolean&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.true.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| Required functionality for simulating collision cascades&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 electronic_stopping = .true.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_groupID = all  ! Must mention if it acts for a specific group of atoms; 'all' is default and need not be mentioned.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_cut = 1.0      ! in eV&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_freq_out = 10&lt;br /&gt;
 estop_filename = 'stopping-data-file'&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_prev_time&amp;diff=624</id>
		<title>Eel md prev time</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_prev_time&amp;diff=624"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:28:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of the time evolved till the last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; output file. In this file MD times are written by adding with the given value in femtoseconds units.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Float&lt;br /&gt;
| Floating point values&lt;br /&gt;
| 0.0 fs&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the last MD time value in fs units from file &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=623</id>
		<title>Eel md last step</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=623"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:27:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is internally used while writing data to the electronic energy transfer output file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 100, 1000, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 0&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If previous run was up to 1000 steps, use 1000 here. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=622</id>
		<title>Eel md last step</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=622"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:25:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the electronic energy transfer output file, ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 100, 1000, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 0&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If previous run was up to 1000 steps, use 1000 here. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=621</id>
		<title>Eel md last step</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=621"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:24:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the electronic energy transfer output file.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 100, 1000, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 0&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If previous run was up to 1000 steps, use 1000 here. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_prev_time&amp;diff=620</id>
		<title>Eel md prev time</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_prev_time&amp;diff=620"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:23:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of the time evolved till the last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is use...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of the time evolved till the last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; output file. In this file only MD times are written by adding with the given value in femtoseconds units.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Float&lt;br /&gt;
| Floating point values&lt;br /&gt;
| 0.0 fs&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the last MD time value in fs units from file &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_E_prev_time&amp;diff=619</id>
		<title>Eel E prev time</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_E_prev_time&amp;diff=619"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:19:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_E_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of the cumulative electronic energy loss till the last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt output file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_E_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Float&lt;br /&gt;
| Floating point values&lt;br /&gt;
| 0.0 eV&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the last cumulative electronic energy transfer value from file &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_E_prev_time&amp;diff=618</id>
		<title>Eel E prev time</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_E_prev_time&amp;diff=618"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:19:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: Created page with &amp;quot;eel_E_prev_time sets the value of the cumulative electronic energy loss till the last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;eel_E_prev_time sets the value of the cumulative electronic energy loss till the last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt output file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_E_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Float&lt;br /&gt;
| Floating point values&lt;br /&gt;
| 0.0 eV&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the last cumulative electronic energy transfer value from file &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=617</id>
		<title>Eel md last step</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_md_last_step&amp;diff=617"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:15:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to th...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the value of last MD step of a previous run. It is used only in case of restarting a simulation. This value is used while writing data to the electronic energy transfer output file.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 100, 1000, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 0&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=MD_options&amp;diff=616</id>
		<title>MD options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=MD_options&amp;diff=616"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:11:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Electronic stopping */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Molecular dynamics]] simulations are invoked with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;turbogap md&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The most important options in the [[input file]] that you need to worry about are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[md_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the time step for [[velocity Verlet]] integration;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[md_nsteps]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the number of time steps to propagate the atomic positions;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formalism to keep the temperature constant (or not);&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the group ID of atoms on which thermostat will act;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[t_beg]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the initial thermostating temperature if a thermostat is chosen;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[t_end]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the final thermostating temperature if a thermostat is chosen;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[tau_t]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the time constant for the thermostat, if chosen;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[barostat]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formalism to keep the pressure constant (or not);&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[p_beg]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the initial barostating pressure if a barostat is chosen;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[p_end]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the final barostating pressure if a barostat is chosen;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[tau_p]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the time constant of the barostat, if chosen;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[gamma_p]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: the inverse compressibility of the system if a thermostat is chosen;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[barostat_sym]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: selects which degrees of freedom of the simulation box are affected by the barostating;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[scale_box]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: determines whether the simulation box is scaled during the simulation;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[box_scaling_factor]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: determines by how much the box will be increased during the simulation;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[write_thermo]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: how often to write out thermodynamic information;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[write_xyz]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: how often to write out detailed trajectory information;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[write_lv]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: determines whether the lattice vectors are written together with the thermodynamic information;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[neighbors_buffer]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: defines a buffer region beyond the potential's actual cutoff to enable less frequent neighbor list builds;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[make_group]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: to make a group of atoms by a definite style in the simulation system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also various additional features which can be invoked through different input options. A number of useful features are also currently being developed. These features will suite specific purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adaptive time ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adaptive_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formalism to perform MD with variable time-steps;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: a valid group ID of atoms on which this process will act;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tstep_interval]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: interval at which the algorithm is called to calculate a new time-step;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tmin]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: minimum limit of time-step;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tmax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: maximum limit of time-step;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_xmax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: maximum allowed displacement by an atom per time-step;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_emax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: maximum allowed energy transfer by an atom per time-step;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Electronic stopping ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[electronic_stopping]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formalism(s) to estimate electronic energy loss (EEL) of atoms;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: a valid group ID of atoms on which this process will act;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: lower energy cutoff below which no EEL is to be calculated;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: how often to write the EEL data to file;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: name of the file containing electronic stopping power data;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: last step of MD in previous run in case of a restarted simulation;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: MD time evolved in previous run in case of a restarted simulation;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: last value of cumulative electronic energy loss in previous run in case of a restarted simulation;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Non-adiabatic processes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formalism(s) to account for electronic stopping and electron-phonon coupling;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: a valid group ID on which this process will act;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_fdm_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: choice to activate/deactivate updating of electronic temperature;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_friction_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: choice to activate/deactivate friction forces;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_random_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: choice to activate/deactivate random forces;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_betafile]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: name of file containing electronic stopping coupling parameter data;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_Tinfile]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: name of file containing electronic parameters and mesh for finite difference method (FDM);&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_box_limits]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: lower and higher boundaries on three directions to construct mesh for FDM;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_rho_e]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: scaling parameter for FDM mesh; &lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_C_e]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: electronic heat capacity per unit volume;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_kappa_e]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: electronic thermal conductivity;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_Ti_e]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: initial electronic temperature;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_gsx]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: number of grids in x-direction;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_gsy]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: number of grids in y-direction;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_gsz]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: number of grids in z-direction;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_fdm_steps]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: number of steps for integration of heat diffusion equation;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: last step of MD in previous run in case of restarted run;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: MD time evolved in previous run in case of restarted run;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: last value of cumulative electronic energy transfer in previous run in case of restarted run;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_freq_Tout]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: how often to write out energy transfer and electronic temperature data; &lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_freq_mesh_Tout]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: how often to write out full map of electronic temperatures;&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_Toutfile]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: name of the file for electronic temperature map;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=615</id>
		<title>Electronic stopping</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=615"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:05:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the option for doing a radiation cascade simulation where the electronic stopping will be taken into account and electronic energy loss will be calculated. The force equation is modified by a friction-like term which is given as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbf{F}_I = -\mathbf{\nabla}_IU - S_e\frac{\mathbf{v}_I}{v_I}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The electronic stopping powers &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;S_e&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; are provided through an input data file, see related keyword &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
This is typically invoked while simulating collision cascades of atoms. There are three input keywords for which typically inputs need to be provided if this calculation is invoked. These are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_freq_out&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_E_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Boolean&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.true.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_E_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_prev_time]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_md_last_step]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| Required functionality for simulating collision cascades&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 electronic_stopping = .true.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_groupID = all  ! Must mention if it acts for a specific group of atoms; 'all' is default and need not be mentioned.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_cut = 1.0      ! in eV&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_freq_out = 10&lt;br /&gt;
 estop_filename = 'stopping-data-file'&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=614</id>
		<title>Electronic stopping</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=614"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T10:03:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the option for doing a radiation cascade simulation where the electronic stopping will be taken into account and electronic energy loss will be calculated. The force equation is modified by a friction-like term which is given as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbf{F}_I = -\mathbf{\nabla}_IU - S_e\frac{\mathbf{v}_I}{v_I}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The electronic stopping powers &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;S_e&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; are provided through an input data file, see related keyword &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
This is typically invoked while simulating collision cascades of atoms. There are three input keywords for which typically inputs need to be provided if this calculation is invoked. These are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_freq_out&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_E_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_prev_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_md_last_step&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Boolean&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.true.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]], &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Required functionality for simulating collision cascades&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 electronic_stopping = .true.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_groupID = all  ! Must mention if it acts for a specific group of atoms; 'all' is default and need not be mentioned.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_cut = 1.0      ! in eV&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_freq_out = 10&lt;br /&gt;
 estop_filename = 'stopping-data-file'&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_cut&amp;diff=613</id>
		<title>Eel cut</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_cut&amp;diff=613"/>
		<updated>2024-03-14T09:54:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the lower cut-off kinetic energy of an atom below which there will be no friction force on it due to electronic stopping. Friction force will not act on an atom if its energy is lower than the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or the lowest energy in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, whichever is higher. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| Float&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive floating point number&lt;br /&gt;
| 1.0 eV&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[electronic_stopping]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Typical values are in range 1.0-30.0 eV, may depend on material.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=612</id>
		<title>Electronic stopping</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Electronic_stopping&amp;diff=612"/>
		<updated>2024-03-14T04:55:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the option for doing a radiation cascade simulation where the electronic stopping will be taken into account and electronic energy loss will be calculated. The force equation is modified by a friction-like term which is given as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbf{F}_I = -\mathbf{\nabla}_IU - S_e\frac{\mathbf{v}_I}{v_I}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The electronic stopping powers &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;S_e&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; are provided through an input data file, see related keyword &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
This is typically invoked while simulating collision cascades of atoms. There are three input keywords for which typically inputs need to be provided if this calculation is invoked. These are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_freq_out&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;electronic_stopping&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Boolean&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.true.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]], &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Required functionality for simulating collision cascades&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 electronic_stopping = .true.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_groupID = all  ! Must mention if it acts for a specific group of atoms; 'all' is default and need not be mentioned.&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_cut = 1.0      ! in eV&lt;br /&gt;
 eel_freq_out = 10&lt;br /&gt;
 estop_filename = 'stopping-data-file'&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=611</id>
		<title>Eph Tinfile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=611"/>
		<updated>2024-03-11T13:39:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes the name of the file containing the parameters to construct the mesh in three dimensions for the electronic system. If this file is provided, then the corresponding electronic parameters need not be provided in input file as those will not be considered. This file has to be prepared in a standard format. This is shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 1st line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 2nd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 3rd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line – gsx gsy gsz number_of_fdm_steps&lt;br /&gt;
 5th line – mesh_xlimit_low mesh_xlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 6th line – mesh_ylimit_low mesh_ylimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 7th line – mesh_zlimit_low mesh_zlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 8th line – i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 9th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 10th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 Values are provided for the full mesh.&lt;br /&gt;
 [Note that mesh indices i, j, k must start from 1 not 0.]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Example (mostly used)===&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 # 3 lines of comments&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 1&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note (additional uses)=== &lt;br /&gt;
(1) To simulate with an external source term in S_e, at least one value under the 'flag' column must be set equal to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) To simulate (non-linear case) using temperature-dependent parameters C_e and K_e, at least one value under 'T_dyn_flag' column must be set equal to 1. Then &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;C_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;K_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; has to be provided through a file named as &amp;quot;Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt&amp;quot;, which has a simple format as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
 # First 3 comment lines&lt;br /&gt;
 # Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt file&lt;br /&gt;
 # First N C_e(T_e) with T_e, no line gap, then M K_e(T_e) with T_e &lt;br /&gt;
 N&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 3.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 4.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 5.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
 M&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 0.0048&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 0.0248&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 0.0348&lt;br /&gt;
 300.0 0.0448&lt;br /&gt;
 400.0 0.0515&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Short file names&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If this file is not provided the FDM mesh is constructed from given input (or default) data. Put the name of file within quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_betafile&amp;diff=610</id>
		<title>Eph betafile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_betafile&amp;diff=610"/>
		<updated>2024-03-11T13:38:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_betafile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes the name of the file containing the electronic stopping coupling parameter. This file has standard format. In case there are multiple elements in the target material, the data corresponding to each element should be in order the elements are named in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;species&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; input keyword. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_betafile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Short file names&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[electronic_stopping]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| A coupling parameter file must be provided when invoking this method in MD simulation. Put the name of file within quotes. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Estop_filename&amp;diff=609</id>
		<title>Estop filename</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Estop_filename&amp;diff=609"/>
		<updated>2024-03-11T13:37:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes in the name of the text file that contains electronic stopping power data. This file will have energies in eV units and stopping power in eV/Ang units. The data for stopping in the text file should be provided such that it covers the value of energy given in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The highest energy in the file must also be greater than possible maximum energy of atoms in the simulation. Energies should be put in increasing order in the first column and the corresponding stopping powers in the 2nd column. If there are multiple elements in the target material, then their stopping powers will follow in 3rd, 4th, 5th, etc. columns. For multiple elements in a target material, the stopping powers of the elements should be arranged in consecutive columns in order as they appear in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;species&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; input. The data in the file should follow the format as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 1st line – Any useful information&lt;br /&gt;
 2nd line – number of rows of data points, N&lt;br /&gt;
 3rd line – energy unit (eV) and symbols of elements (must be) in order as in input file&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line onwards – energy and electronic stopping values (eV/Ang) are provided as follows&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line – E1 (dE/dx)1(element 1) (dE/dx)1(element 2) (dE/dx)1(element 3) .…..&lt;br /&gt;
 5th line – E2 (dE/dx)2(element 1) (dE/dx)2(element 2) (dE/dx)2(element 3) .…..&lt;br /&gt;
 .. ..&lt;br /&gt;
 ..&lt;br /&gt;
 Nth line – EN (dE/dx)N(element 1) (dE/dx)N(element 2) (dE/dx)N(element 3) .…..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
 # Electronic stopping data E (eV) vs. dE/dx (eV/Ang) for Si and C&lt;br /&gt;
 4&lt;br /&gt;
 E(eV) Si C&lt;br /&gt;
 1.1000E+00	1.1680E-01	1.95E-01&lt;br /&gt;
 1.3000E+00	1.2150E-01	2.03E-01&lt;br /&gt;
 1.4000E+00	1.2610E-01	2.11E-01&lt;br /&gt;
 1.0000E+07	2.9960E+02	1.43E+02&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| 'ShortFileName'&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[electronic_stopping]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The electronic stopping power data may be obtained from an ion transport code. Put the name of file within quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Toutfile&amp;diff=608</id>
		<title>Eph Toutfile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Toutfile&amp;diff=608"/>
		<updated>2024-03-11T13:35:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Toutfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the name of the file where electronic temperature map is written. This data written for last MD step in this file can serve as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for restarting a run after some editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Toutfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Short file names&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_freq_mesh_Tout]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The data from this file may be used for restarting from a previous MD run. Put the name of file within quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=607</id>
		<title>Eph Tinfile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_Tinfile&amp;diff=607"/>
		<updated>2024-03-11T13:28:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes the name of the file containing the parameters to construct the mesh in three dimensions for the electronic system. If this file is provided, then the corresponding electronic parameters need not be provided in input file as those will not be considered. This file has to be prepared in a standard format. This is shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 1st line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 2nd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 3rd line – any comments&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line – gsx gsy gsz number_of_fdm_steps&lt;br /&gt;
 5th line – mesh_xlimit_low mesh_xlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 6th line – mesh_ylimit_low mesh_ylimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 7th line – mesh_zlimit_low mesh_zlimit_high&lt;br /&gt;
 8th line – i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 9th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 10th line – values corresponding to column headers&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 ….&lt;br /&gt;
 Values are provided for the full mesh.&lt;br /&gt;
 [Note that mesh indices i, j, k must start from 1 not 0.]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Example (mostly used)===&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 # 3 lines of comments&lt;br /&gt;
 #&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 1&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 -30.0 30.0&lt;br /&gt;
 i j k T_e S_e rho_e C_e K_e flag T_dyn_flag&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 1 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 1 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 1 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
 2 2 2 50.0 1.0 1.0 3.5E-01 0.12 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note (additional uses)=== &lt;br /&gt;
(1) To simulate with an external source term in S_e, at least one value under the 'flag' column must be set equal to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) To simulate (non-linear case) using temperature-dependent parameters C_e and K_e, at least one value under 'T_dyn_flag' column must be set equal to 1. Then &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;C_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;K_e(T_e)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; has to be provided through a file named as &amp;quot;Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt&amp;quot;, which has a simple format as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
 # First 3 comment lines&lt;br /&gt;
 # Te-dependent_e-parameters.txt file&lt;br /&gt;
 # First N C_e(T_e) with T_e, no line gap, then M K_e(T_e) with T_e &lt;br /&gt;
 N&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 3.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 4.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 5.5e-7&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
 M&lt;br /&gt;
 10.0 0.0048&lt;br /&gt;
 100.0 0.0248&lt;br /&gt;
 200.0 0.0348&lt;br /&gt;
 300.0 0.0448&lt;br /&gt;
 400.0 0.0515&lt;br /&gt;
 ..... .....&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_Tinfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Short file names&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If this file is not provided the FDM mesh is constructed from given input (or default) data. Put name of file within quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Estop_filename&amp;diff=606</id>
		<title>Estop filename</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Estop_filename&amp;diff=606"/>
		<updated>2024-03-11T13:27:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes in the name of the text file that contains electronic stopping power data. This file will have energies in eV units and stopping power in eV/Ang units. The data for stopping in the text file should be provided such that it covers the value of energy given in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_cut&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The highest energy in the file must also be greater than possible maximum energy of atoms in the simulation. Energies should be put in increasing order in the first column and the corresponding stopping powers in the 2nd column. If there are multiple elements in the target material, then their stopping powers will follow in 3rd, 4th, 5th, etc. columns. For multiple elements in a target material, the stopping powers of the elements should be arranged in consecutive columns in order as they appear in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;species&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; input. The data in the file should follow the format as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 1st line – Any useful information&lt;br /&gt;
 2nd line – number of rows of data points, N&lt;br /&gt;
 3rd line – energy unit (eV) and symbols of elements (must be) in order as in input file&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line onwards – energy and electronic stopping values (eV/Ang) are provided as follows&lt;br /&gt;
 4th line – E1 (dE/dx)1(element 1) (dE/dx)1(element 2) (dE/dx)1(element 3) .…..&lt;br /&gt;
 5th line – E2 (dE/dx)2(element 1) (dE/dx)2(element 2) (dE/dx)2(element 3) .…..&lt;br /&gt;
 .. ..&lt;br /&gt;
 ..&lt;br /&gt;
 Nth line – EN (dE/dx)N(element 1) (dE/dx)N(element 2) (dE/dx)N(element 3) .…..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
 # Electronic stopping data E (eV) vs. dE/dx (eV/Ang) for Si and C&lt;br /&gt;
 4&lt;br /&gt;
 E(eV) Si C&lt;br /&gt;
 1.1000E+00	1.1680E-01	1.95E-01&lt;br /&gt;
 1.3000E+00	1.2150E-01	2.03E-01&lt;br /&gt;
 1.4000E+00	1.2610E-01	2.11E-01&lt;br /&gt;
 1.0000E+07	2.9960E+02	1.43E+02&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;estop_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| 'ShortFileName'&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[electronic_stopping]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_freq_out]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The electronic stopping power data may be obtained from an ion transport code. Put name of file within quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_betafile&amp;diff=605</id>
		<title>Eph betafile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_betafile&amp;diff=605"/>
		<updated>2024-03-11T13:26:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_betafile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; takes the name of the file containing the electronic stopping coupling parameter. This file has standard format. In case there are multiple elements in the target material, the data corresponding to each element should be in order the elements are named in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;species&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; input keyword. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_betafile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Short file names&lt;br /&gt;
| 'NULL'&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[electronic_stopping]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| A coupling parameter file must be provided when invoking this method in MD simulation. Put name of file within quotes. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=TurboGAP_team&amp;diff=604</id>
		<title>TurboGAP team</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=TurboGAP_team&amp;diff=604"/>
		<updated>2023-12-17T11:31:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Code contributors */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Head developer and project's principal investigator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Miguel Caro ===&lt;br /&gt;
Academy of Finland Research Fellow&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Chemistry and Materials Science&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
miguel.caro@aalto.fi&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://miguelcaro.org miguelcaro.org]&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Code contributors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heikki Muhli ===&lt;br /&gt;
PhD Candidate&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Applied Physics&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cristian Achim ===&lt;br /&gt;
Application Specialist&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CSC - IT Center for Science, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)csc.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tigany Zarrouk ===&lt;br /&gt;
Postdoctoral Researcher&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Chemistry and Materials Science&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Uttiyoarnab Saha ===&lt;br /&gt;
Postdoctoral Researcher&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Applied Physics&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interatomic potentials contributors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Jan Kloppenburg ===&lt;br /&gt;
Postdoctoral Researcher&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Chemistry and Materials Science&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Richard Jana ===&lt;br /&gt;
Postdoctoral Researcher&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Chemistry and Materials Science&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paulina Prslja ===&lt;br /&gt;
Postdoctoral Researcher&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Chemistry and Materials Science&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rina Ibragimova ===&lt;br /&gt;
Postdoctoral Researcher&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Chemistry and Materials Science&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Alexis Front ===&lt;br /&gt;
Postdoctoral Researcher&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Department of Chemistry and Materials Science&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
and Department of Applied Physics&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aalto University, Finland&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
firstname.lastname(at)aalto.fi&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=601</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=601"/>
		<updated>2023-11-11T07:47:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Group style atomtype */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be equal to a multiple of 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group of atoms with the mentioned atom IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs of the atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=600</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=600"/>
		<updated>2023-11-11T07:41:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Group style id */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be equal to a multiple of 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group of atoms with the mentioned atom IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs of the atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=599</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=599"/>
		<updated>2023-11-11T07:40:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Group style block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be equal to a multiple of 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=598</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=598"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:45:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Examples */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=597</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=597"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:45:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Example */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=596</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=596"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:45:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Example */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=595</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=595"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:45:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Examples */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=594</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=594"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:45:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Example */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=593</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=593"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:45:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Examples */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=592</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=592"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:44:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Example */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=591</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=591"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:44:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=590</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=590"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:43:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Summary&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=589</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=589"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:43:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Summary */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Summary&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=588</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=588"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:42:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_freq_Tout&amp;diff=587</id>
		<title>Eph freq Tout</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_freq_Tout&amp;diff=587"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:37:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_freq_Tout&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the interval of MD steps at which the energy transfer between electronic and atomic systems and the electronic temperature data are written to output file named as 'eph-EnergySharingData.txt'. There will be eight columns of data, viz. time (fs), frictional energy (eV) on current time, random energy (eV) on current time, cumulative net energy transfer (eV) till the current time, the electronic temperature (K) and the temperature (K), kinetic and potential energies (eV) of atoms in the group given through &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_groupID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_freq_Tout&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Required&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 1, 5, 10, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_fdm_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_friction_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_friction_option]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Use larger interval if cumulative energy transfer is important and temperature variation over broad times are sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_freq_out&amp;diff=586</id>
		<title>Eel freq out</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eel_freq_out&amp;diff=586"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:35:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_freq_out&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the interval of MD steps at which the electronic energy loss (EEL) data will be written to output file named as 'ElectronicEnergyLoss.txt'. First line in the output will have names of columns and in the following lines there will be five columns of data: time in fs units, EEL in the present MD step in eV units, cumulative EEL till the present MD time in eV units and the kinetic energy and temperature of the atoms in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_groupID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eel_freq_out&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[electronic_stopping]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_cut]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[estop_filename]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| If EEL at every step is required use 1, otherwise use larger interval if cumulative EEL is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_groupID&amp;diff=585</id>
		<title>Eph groupID</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Eph_groupID&amp;diff=585"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:33:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Example */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_groupID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sets the group of atoms for which the [[nonadiabatic_processes]] will be applied during the simulation.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;eph_groupID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| String&lt;br /&gt;
| Any valid group ID&lt;br /&gt;
| all (for all atoms)&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[nonadiabatic_processes]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[make_group]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[nonadiabatic_processes]] = .true.&lt;br /&gt;
 [[eph_groupID]] = all&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=584</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=584"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:31:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=583</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=583"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:31:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Group style subtract */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== See also ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=582</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=582"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:31:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Example */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== See also ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=581</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=581"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:30:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
==Example==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== See also ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=580</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=580"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:26:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: /* Group style block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
 make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
 …… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
 xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
#  make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
#  make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;adaptive_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Boolean&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.true.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tstep_interval]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tmin]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tmax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_xmax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_emax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Required functionality for simulating collision cascades&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=579</id>
		<title>Make group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://turbogap.fi/wiki/index.php?title=Make_group&amp;diff=579"/>
		<updated>2023-11-06T14:21:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Uttiyo: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creates a group for the atoms within the simulation system which are designated by one of the various styles (presently seven) described below. &lt;br /&gt;
One or more atoms can be combined into groups on which different physical processes can be made to act while doing an MD simulation. For example, a thermostat can be applied to the sides of a cubic box when another process can be active on rest of the atoms inside the side walls. There are several ways by which different groups of atoms can be made. This keyword can be used more than once in the input script as more than one group may need to be defined for modeling specific setups. The general format for using the make_group command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;make_group&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; 	&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, there are four kinds of input data that are required in order to define a group of atom(s). Each of these are explained in the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_ID&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is the ID (or name) of the present group that is being defined. The atoms in the group will be identified by this name. For any subsequent operation on this group of atoms this group ID has to be referred. The name can be a combination of characters and numbers up to length 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;group_Style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; – it is one of various styles by which a group of atoms can be defined. The available group styles are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;all&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is already defined for all atoms in the simulation box and cannot be re-defined. Each of these group styles are explained below which will help to understand the third and fourth kinds of input data (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) specific to the style.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: a group of all atoms with group style all and group ID all is defined by default. At present, a maximum of additional 16 groups can be made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;block&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a block of atoms. The block is built with the specified lower and upper limits of values along the x-, y- and z-axes (i.e., xlow, xhigh, ylow, yhigh, etc.) specified in the input. Here &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of values that will be provided to define block (or blocks together). One block is defined by 6 limits, so when a block style group is being made this number should be at least equal to 6. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are real numbers denoting the limits of the block (or blocks together).&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = blk1 block 6 xlow xhigh ylow yhigh zlow zhigh&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named blk1 containing the atoms whose coordinates are within the limits (including the limiting values).&lt;br /&gt;
#  make_group = blk2 block 12&lt;br /&gt;
xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group of atoms whose coordinates are within any of the two blocks defined by the limits. &lt;br /&gt;
#  make_group = blk3 block 36&lt;br /&gt;
xlow1 xhigh1 ylow1 yhigh1 zlow1 zhigh1&lt;br /&gt;
xlow2 xhigh2 ylow2 yhigh2 zlow2 zhigh2&lt;br /&gt;
…… ……. ……. ……. ……. …….&lt;br /&gt;
xlow6 xhigh6 ylow6 yhigh6 zlow6 zhigh6&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a single group of atoms named as blk3 where six block are defined together (they can be all the sides of the simulation box, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;add&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to add the atoms in two or more groups to the group that is presently being defined. So, necessarily the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are now just the IDs of the groups whose atoms should be  added into the present group. The groups to be considered for adding should be already defined before performing this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = blk123 add 3 blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This will make group blk123 contain all the atoms that are in groups blk1, blk2 and blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;id&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to make a group a atoms with the mentioned IDs. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the number of IDs that will be provided and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are the IDs.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = grp1 id 5 21 33 212 300 100&lt;br /&gt;
This will make a group named grp1 with five atoms whose IDs are as given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subtract&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to form a group of the atoms which is only in one group and none of the other groups. Here again, the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be at least equal to 2, followed those many &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, which are the IDs of the groups. The present group will be made with those atoms which are in the group mentioned first and in none of the subsequent groups.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = sub1 subtract 2 all blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub1 containing all atoms in the simulation box which are not in the group blk3.&lt;br /&gt;
#  make_group = sub subtract 4 all blk1 blk2 blk3&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named sub where those atoms only are present which are not in any of the groups blk1 blk2 blk3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sphere&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to define a group of atoms which fall within a sphere of a given radius.  The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; here is 4 and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are first the radius of the sphere and then followed by the x, y and z coordinates of the centre of the sphere.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group = sph1 sphere 4 3.2 4.2 5.0 4.2&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group sph1 for the atoms which are within a sphere of radius 3.2 Å and centred at (4.2, 5.0, 4.2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;atomtype&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to group atoms by their types. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; should be greater than 1 and can be maximum equal to the number of species of atoms in the simulation box. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Entries_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are just the symbols of the elements or species. This may be required only when the simulation system consists of many types of atoms.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
#  make_group = grp2 atomtype 1 H&lt;br /&gt;
This makes a group named grp2 of all the H atoms in the system, provided there are multiple species in the system and H is one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Group style &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dynamic&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
This style is used to designate an already defined group as dynamic, meaning that the atoms in this group will be checked if they still belong to the geometrical region that was originally defined for them as the MD time has evolved. This check is performed at an interval of MD steps provided through the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Number_specific_to_group_style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The update of the specified group is performed at the specified interval after the inter-atomic forces have been computed. Note that defining groups as dynamic is computation expensive and doing too frequent an update of the dynamic groups will also increase computation times.&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group =  blk2 dynamic 1000&lt;br /&gt;
# make_group =  sph1 dynamic 100&lt;br /&gt;
In example 1, the group blk2 of style block defined earlier will be checked for update of its constituent atoms, which means it will be remade, after every 1000 MD time-steps. In example 2, the group sph1 of style sphere defined earlier will undergo the same update after every 100 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_time_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[optimize_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[thermostat_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eel_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[eph_groupID]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Summary for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;adaptive_time&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keyword&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Required/optional&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Accepted values&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Default&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| See also&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;text-align:left;&amp;quot;| Remarks&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional&lt;br /&gt;
| Boolean&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.true.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;.false.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tstep_interval]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tmin]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_tmax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_xmax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[[adapt_emax]]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Required functionality for simulating collision cascades&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Uttiyo</name></author>
		
	</entry>
</feed>